<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mmoura</id>
	<title>PHR CRM - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mmoura"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Special:Contributions/Mmoura"/>
	<updated>2026-04-29T12:33:05Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1842</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1842"/>
		<updated>2025-07-02T16:11:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* ELD and HOS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Motive Support Line=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For any questions or issues with your Motive App, feel free to call the Motive Support Line at 855-434-3564&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – Motive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the app both for [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/motive-driver/id706401738 IOS] and [[INSERT LINK|Android]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HOS Motive Drivers App - [https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us/articles/6475129978909--New-Drivers-Start-Here-Getting-Started-with-Motive-for-Drivers Motive Drivers App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HOS Motive for drivers - [https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/article_attachments/6541249835805 Drivers instruction manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive for Fleet Admin'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us/articles/6348627756701--New-Fleet-Admins-Start-Here-Getting-Started-with-Motive-for-Fleet-Admin Getting Started with Motive for Fleet Admin]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive Drivers App Walkthrough'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://vimeo.com/879340128 Motive Drivers App Walkthrough]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive Help Center'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us Motive Help Center]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phone: 855-434-3564&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1841</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1841"/>
		<updated>2025-07-02T16:01:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* ELD and HOS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Motive Support Line=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For any questions or issues with your Motive App, feel free to call the Motive Support Line at 855-434-3564&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – Motive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the app both for [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/motive-driver/id706401738 IOS] and [[INSERT LINK|Android]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HOS Motive Drivers App - [https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us/articles/6475129978909--New-Drivers-Start-Here-Getting-Started-with-Motive-for-Drivers Motive Drivers App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HOS Motive for drivers - [https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/article_attachments/6541249835805 Drivers instruction manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive for Fleet Admin'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us/articles/6348627756701--New-Fleet-Admins-Start-Here-Getting-Started-with-Motive-for-Fleet-Admin Getting Started with Motive for Fleet Admin]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive Drivers App Walkthrough'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://vimeo.com/879340128 Motive Drivers App Walkthrough]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive Help Center'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us Motive Help Center]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Employee_PTO_Management&amp;diff=1840</id>
		<title>Employee PTO Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Employee_PTO_Management&amp;diff=1840"/>
		<updated>2025-03-26T17:15:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Employee PTO Management */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Employee PTO Management==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section on Employee Time Off Management includes planned time off (PTO) and unplanned time off due to various reasons such as illness or emergencies. Efficient time off management is crucial for maintaining productivity, ensuring fair treatment of employees, and promoting a healthy work-life balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advance PTO ===&lt;br /&gt;
All PHR employees will complete and submit the next [https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1soTIuCPUIo8l2VB9Prp26cfcLWbktot6myOybgW4SPk/edit FORM] to apply for '''advance PTO only'''. Employees will need a Google email address to access the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employees are requested to NOT use this form for unplanned PTO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unplanned PTO for technicians only- PeopleReady ===&lt;br /&gt;
Technician calls in sick by either calling or texting the Operations Support Number. During business hours, the Operations Team receives the phone call or message and makes the necessary arrangements. Outside of business hours, the Operations member on call '''MUST notify [[PeopleReady Staff Hiring]] by 6 am the same day''' and arrange for a substitute technician. Operations must notify Admin via email as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unplanned PTO for all other employees ===&lt;br /&gt;
All employees (excluding technicians) are requested to call their manager and request time off. The manager must notify Admin via email as soon as possible. Related emails and texts will be stored in the employee’s personnel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Show/ No Calls ===&lt;br /&gt;
An employee who misses work without informing their manager in time is considered a no show/ no call. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an employee misses work without notice, Operations team makes an effort to contact the employee via call/ text and informs the Branch Manager of the outcome. Admin tracks the no show/ no call employee and the Branch Manager reprimands the employee. If the employee repeats the behavior, they can face suspension without pay or termination of employment.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Employee_PTO_Management&amp;diff=1839</id>
		<title>Employee PTO Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Employee_PTO_Management&amp;diff=1839"/>
		<updated>2025-03-26T17:13:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Advance PTO */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Employee PTO Management==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section on Employee Time Off Management includes planned time off (PTO) and unplanned time off due to various reasons such as illness or emergencies. Efficient time off management is crucial for maintaining productivity, ensuring fair treatment of employees, and promoting a healthy work-life balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advance PTO ===&lt;br /&gt;
All PHR employees will complete and submit the next form [https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1soTIuCPUIo8l2VB9Prp26cfcLWbktot6myOybgW4SPk/edit] to apply for '''advance PTO only'''. Employees will need a Google email address to access the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employees are requested to NOT use this form for unplanned PTO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unplanned PTO for technicians only- PeopleReady ===&lt;br /&gt;
Technician calls in sick by either calling or texting the Operations Support Number. During business hours, the Operations Team receives the phone call or message and makes the necessary arrangements. Outside of business hours, the Operations member on call '''MUST notify [[PeopleReady Staff Hiring]] by 6 am the same day''' and arrange for a substitute technician. Operations must notify Admin via email as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unplanned PTO for all other employees ===&lt;br /&gt;
All employees (excluding technicians) are requested to call their manager and request time off. The manager must notify Admin via email as soon as possible. Related emails and texts will be stored in the employee’s personnel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Show/ No Calls ===&lt;br /&gt;
An employee who misses work without informing their manager in time is considered a no show/ no call. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an employee misses work without notice, Operations team makes an effort to contact the employee via call/ text and informs the Branch Manager of the outcome. Admin tracks the no show/ no call employee and the Branch Manager reprimands the employee. If the employee repeats the behavior, they can face suspension without pay or termination of employment.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Employee_PTO_Management&amp;diff=1838</id>
		<title>Employee PTO Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Employee_PTO_Management&amp;diff=1838"/>
		<updated>2025-03-26T17:12:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Advance PTO */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Employee PTO Management==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section on Employee Time Off Management includes planned time off (PTO) and unplanned time off due to various reasons such as illness or emergencies. Efficient time off management is crucial for maintaining productivity, ensuring fair treatment of employees, and promoting a healthy work-life balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advance PTO ===&lt;br /&gt;
All PHR employees will complete and submit the [https://docs.google.com/forms/d/1soTIuCPUIo8l2VB9Prp26cfcLWbktot6myOybgW4SPk/edit] to apply for '''advance PTO only'''. Employees will need a Google email address to access the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employees are requested to NOT use this form for unplanned PTO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unplanned PTO for technicians only- PeopleReady ===&lt;br /&gt;
Technician calls in sick by either calling or texting the Operations Support Number. During business hours, the Operations Team receives the phone call or message and makes the necessary arrangements. Outside of business hours, the Operations member on call '''MUST notify [[PeopleReady Staff Hiring]] by 6 am the same day''' and arrange for a substitute technician. Operations must notify Admin via email as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unplanned PTO for all other employees ===&lt;br /&gt;
All employees (excluding technicians) are requested to call their manager and request time off. The manager must notify Admin via email as soon as possible. Related emails and texts will be stored in the employee’s personnel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No Show/ No Calls ===&lt;br /&gt;
An employee who misses work without informing their manager in time is considered a no show/ no call. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an employee misses work without notice, Operations team makes an effort to contact the employee via call/ text and informs the Branch Manager of the outcome. Admin tracks the no show/ no call employee and the Branch Manager reprimands the employee. If the employee repeats the behavior, they can face suspension without pay or termination of employment.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1837</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1837"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T14:51:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Proposal Maker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Motive Support Line=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For any questions or issues with your Motive App, feel free to call the Motive Support Line at 855-434-3564&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – Motive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the app both for [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/motive-driver/id706401738 IOS] and [[INSERT LINK|Android]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HOS Motive Drivers App - [https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us/articles/6475129978909--New-Drivers-Start-Here-Getting-Started-with-Motive-for-Drivers Motive Drivers App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HOS Motive for drivers - [https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/article_attachments/6541249835805 Drivers instruction manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive for Fleet Admin'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us/articles/6348627756701--New-Fleet-Admins-Start-Here-Getting-Started-with-Motive-for-Fleet-Admin Getting Started with Motive for Fleet Admin]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive Drivers App Walkthrough'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://vimeo.com/879340128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Motive Help Center'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://helpcenter.gomotive.com/hc/en-us Motive Help Center]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=PeopleReady_Staff_Hiring&amp;diff=1828</id>
		<title>PeopleReady Staff Hiring</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=PeopleReady_Staff_Hiring&amp;diff=1828"/>
		<updated>2024-11-06T17:33:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Step by Step Guide for Ordering Temporary Associates */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step by Step Guide for Ordering Temporary Associates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your PeopleReady Customer Number: 001050710  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ordering Process:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Order as EARLY as possible''', the more notice we provide, the better the chance of having the labor available when needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* Order labor for the specific site we will be working at. If working at more than one site, order a separate worker to report to that site if it is more than 30 minutes from the first location. Minimum billing requirement is 4 hours.  &lt;br /&gt;
* If there is a large job, or multiple jobs in one metro area, one worker is fine and the order can be for more than one day if needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* The '''preferred method of ordering is via email'''. If necessary, we can also call in to '''877.338.1039'''  &lt;br /&gt;
We have two primary contacts to work with: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sonja Blue &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lead Specialist   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Office 312-584-8296    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sblue@peopleready.com  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
www.peopleready.com  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chantal Farmer *NOT LONGER WITH PEOPLE READY*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sales Development Representative  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Office (312) 471-9985  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cell (765) 714-0338 www.peopleready.com  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
cfarmer@peopleready.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step by Step Process &amp;amp; Order Form===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1: Email or call our central service team: Job orders will be placed directly via email to '''Sblue@peopleready.com''' and CC '''salesinquiries@peopleready.com''' and CC '''cfarmer@peopleready.com'''  and CC '''operations@potholerepair.com'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2: Provide job details: COPY AND PASTE THE EMAIL TEMPLATE BELOW IN THE EMAIL BODY WHEN ORDERING   &lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;quot;Subject Line” can state  either “Urgent Staffing needed” or “ Requesting staffing in the 'X' area” or whichever state the job is in.&lt;br /&gt;
* Location of Job – PHR - ENTER SITE NAME &amp;amp; LOCATION ADDRESS &lt;br /&gt;
* Job Descriptions - The technician helper works under the direction and supervision of the senior technician as a laborer. This involves working outdoors in various weather conditions including extreme heat and cold. This also involves physical labor including lifting fifty pounds of material consistently, sweeping, shoveling, and raking asphalt, pushing, and pulling wheeled equipment, loading, and unloading the equipment from the trailer. &lt;br /&gt;
* Job Site Contact - PHR - ENTER Senior Tech NAME &amp;amp; Mobil #  &lt;br /&gt;
* Date and Time of Job - PHR - ENTER DATE(S) &amp;amp; Time Labor to Arrive at job site  &lt;br /&gt;
* Number of Temporary Associates - 1 &lt;br /&gt;
* Your PeopleReady Customer Number - '''001050710 '''&lt;br /&gt;
* PO Number (if needed) NOT REQUIRED.&lt;br /&gt;
* Any other special requirements like additional screening, dress code, PPE, etc. - Laborer must wear OSHA approved steel toe boots and long pants.  Gloves and safety vests will be provided.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3: Receive Confirmation &lt;br /&gt;
* You will receive a confirmation number and servicing branch contact information; this establishes that the PeopleReady branch has entered the labor order and it is now pending fulfillment. &lt;br /&gt;
* The Confirmation number is also your Order Number, please use this for your reference. The confirmation does not guarantee worker availability (only pending fulfillment). Jobstack will show you the status of your order. It never hurts to communicate with the servicing  PeopleReady branch team to confirm your needs, as well. Please feel free to call them anytime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Vendor_Mastersheet&amp;diff=1825</id>
		<title>Vendor Mastersheet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Vendor_Mastersheet&amp;diff=1825"/>
		<updated>2024-10-16T17:39:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Vendor Mastersheet */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Vendor Mastersheet==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When field employees run out of materials or face equipment issues, they can call the Operations team to find the nearest mechanic, service center or store to replenish or repair items and continue with the job at hand. Operations team can use the '''[https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1My0rRHUK1MacQNmwR2e2Qxjonjpq815-0wrOpsGp2Io/edit#gid=1866346512 Vendor Mastersheet]''' to find the most optimum vendor by location and service provided. The Vendor mastersheet workbook has three sheets:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Dashboard'''- Depending the location of the crew and the service they are looking for, Operations will select the nearest location (yard) and the service from the dropdowns in cell C2 and C3. The list below will auto-populate depending on the selections the user makes. Operations should choose a &amp;quot;preferred&amp;quot; partner over &amp;quot;secondary&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;road based&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Vendor Mastersheet'''- Contains a list of all existing vendors that Pothole Repair works with. Operations will use this tab to add new vendors or update existing vendor details by adding required vendor information. For the &amp;quot;Priority&amp;quot; dropdown, choose &amp;quot;Preferred&amp;quot; for preferred vendors who are the company's first choice and close to the yard, &amp;quot;Secondary&amp;quot; for secondary vendors close to the yard and &amp;quot;Road based&amp;quot; for vendors who offer services away from the yard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Dropdowns'''- Contains a list of dropdowns that are used within the workbook. This tab can be ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Template used:&lt;br /&gt;
'''[https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1My0rRHUK1MacQNmwR2e2Qxjonjpq815-0wrOpsGp2Io/edit#gid=1866346512 Vendor Mastersheet]'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=DOT_Physical&amp;diff=1822</id>
		<title>DOT Physical</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=DOT_Physical&amp;diff=1822"/>
		<updated>2024-09-23T15:45:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians need to go to Concentra at the earliest time of arrival possible and get this form filled out for them.&lt;br /&gt;
[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1HPf8KLtzUKh9LXHcRG1xI6ncLNXsDMGZ/view?usp=drive_link Concentra Health Form Authorization]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=DOT_Physical&amp;diff=1821</id>
		<title>DOT Physical</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=DOT_Physical&amp;diff=1821"/>
		<updated>2024-09-23T15:44:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Technicians need to go to Concentra at the earliest time of arrival possible and get this form filled out for them.&lt;br /&gt;
[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1HPf8KLtzUKh9LXHcRG1xI6ncLNXsDMGZ/view?usp=drive_link Concentra Health Form Authorization]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=DOT_Physical&amp;diff=1820</id>
		<title>DOT Physical</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=DOT_Physical&amp;diff=1820"/>
		<updated>2024-09-23T15:42:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: Created page with &amp;quot;Technicians need to go to Concentra at the earliest time of arrival possible and get this form filled out for them.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Technicians need to go to Concentra at the earliest time of arrival possible and get this form filled out for them.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=PHR_Operations_%26_Scheduling&amp;diff=1819</id>
		<title>PHR Operations &amp; Scheduling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=PHR_Operations_%26_Scheduling&amp;diff=1819"/>
		<updated>2024-09-23T15:40:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Internal Tasks */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PHR Operations &amp;amp; Scheduling==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Operations team at PHR is responsible for two types of scheduling:&lt;br /&gt;
# Internal Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
# External or Field employee Tasks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Internal Tasks==&lt;br /&gt;
Operations will use [https://calendar.google.com/calendar/u/0?cid=Y19jNzZkY2I5NGJkMWQyOGQxZjliYzVkODk2YTIyNzk2NjNiY2ZmZjg5OWRkMDJlY2YwODdhZWExNjkzMTdmM2FhQGdyb3VwLmNhbGVuZGFyLmdvb2dsZS5jb20 Operations Team Calendar] to initially schedule the following as recurring events and reminders. They will then use the Pothole Repair CRM to set these up as tasks when the due date is close (within two weeks of the due date).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Technician Onboarding and Training''': For details, visit the[http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/New_Technician/_Driver_Onboarding,_Training_and_Documentation Technician Onboarding and Training Section]&lt;br /&gt;
** Truck visual inspection and practical driving test for new technicians (to be scheduled within 1 week of joining)&lt;br /&gt;
** ELD and eTechnician App setup (to be scheduled within 1 week of joining)&lt;br /&gt;
** Online technician training (to be scheduled within 1 week of joining)&lt;br /&gt;
** Written Senior Technician exam (after 90 days and within 6 months of their onboarding and training)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Annual Driving Tests''' (to be scheduled on one day within one week in January annually)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''DOT physical inspections''' (initial test on hire within first week, then scheduled prior to each subsequent expiration date) [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/DOT_Physical]&lt;br /&gt;
* '''DOT vehicle inspections''' (to be scheduled annually during January/ February) [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1FbD0C1MR5pwhtyK0F7Pzp4COCRo19yjj/view?usp=drive_link DOT Inspection Form for Truck] and [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1pXpOYZHkBBnLuGwLT1bDhXWQ0sVhk7CT/view?usp=drive_link DOT Inspection Form for Trailer]&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Monthly Inventory and Truck/Trailer cleaning days''' (last working week of each month): For details, visit the[http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Inventory_Management Inventory Management Section]&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Bi-Annual Inventory Audits''' (to be scheduled in January &amp;amp; June)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Maintenance schedules''' for truck, trailer, and small machines (every 3 months- January, April, July and October) using [https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/16CoIrFW1TULhmQXTp_2E0HxGA3dB-LKmMhbmSmi3vj4/edit the maintenance records]&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Job Site Quality Control Visits''' (to be scheduled at least once a month for each crew): Operations will create the task and schedule, considering Branch Manager’s proximity to client job location. Branch Manager will conduct the Quality Control Visit and complete the [https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLScud4EzotE3GN6bZGghB5CEyaEp63VkVEdW1xLNTET0viU0bg/viewform?usp=sharing Quality Assurance Visit Assessment Form]. Branch Manager will upload all data related to these visits to Google Drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How to create a task in the CRM:&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user has logged into the CRM, at the top right, they can select &amp;quot;New Task&amp;quot; to open a new task. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Special task button.jpg|750px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can name the special task, assign it to a team member, select the type of task from the dropdown and add other details. They click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; to save the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Special task creation.jpg|750px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The special task then shows up in the dispatch calendar and the user can click on it to check or modify details.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Special task calendar detail (1).jpg|750px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External or Field employee Tasks:==&lt;br /&gt;
# Surveyor Inspections&lt;br /&gt;
# Technician Jobs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Survey Inspection Scheduling===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Three types of survey inspections:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Regular- Regular inspections appear directly in the scheduling list and must be completed within 7 days. Operations team is not required to email or notify client when inspection will occur. Operations members receive high-urgency notifications on day 6.&lt;br /&gt;
* Walk with Clients- This survey item appears outlined in red for inspection scheduling only if WWC. Dispatch contacts clients '''immediately''' (no later than the same day) and schedules the inspection as per client preferences. &lt;br /&gt;
* PARC surveys- Auto generated by system and has to be scheduled within 2 weeks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Daily schedule:''' Surveyors can do 10 surveys within a 5-hour driving time, and work for 5 random days from Sunday to Saturday. PARC and regular surveys take approximately 30 minutes each, while WWCs may take 1 hour or more. Large properties such as sports arenas, shopping malls etc. may take longer. CSR notes are embedded in the inspection task and must be read before inspecting and marking the lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scheduling and building the route for surveys:'''&lt;br /&gt;
Dispatch considers various factors when designing and updating routes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Types of Inspection Surveys&lt;br /&gt;
Regular- assign time of 30- 60 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
WWC- assign a longer time of 60-90 minutes. When possible, operations is to assign only one or two WWC per day in order to maximize the total number of inspections performed daily. WWCs are scheduled in advance as per client preference. Surveyor contacts the client prior to arrival on site and confirms the appointment. &lt;br /&gt;
PARC surveys- assign time of 30 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Surveyors within the client region&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Drive time to and from survey/client locations &lt;br /&gt;
Use Google Maps for efficient route design and Drive Time calculator in CRM, to find the shortest driving time between client locations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather considerations (avoiding rain, snow, wind) &lt;br /&gt;
Rain- On small lots, even if the paint washes away, the technician can still find the repairs. For large lots, do not schedule a survey if there is rain forecasted. Under active rain conditions, surveys cannot be completed. However, the surveyor can wait the rain out or move on to another client location where it is not raining that day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Snow- If it starts snowing during the survey, the survey cannot be completed. Do not schedule a survey under snow conditions unless the client site has already been plowed. Operations to call the client a day before the survey and ensure that the lot has been plowed and can be marked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wind- Complete survey as normal, taking precautions to avoid paint splatter such as cardboard guards, paint wheels, handheld paint applicators etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sales pressure &lt;br /&gt;
PHR tries to accommodate sales (and clients) and complete surveys within a timely manner. So, if there is a request to complete a survey earlier than scheduled, operations will try to rearrange the schedule and accommodate the client if possible, either by sending out an additional surveyor or team member.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Time &lt;br /&gt;
Surveyors can do 10 surveys per day. The number of surveys can vary depending on the type of survey, extent of damage and client location. PARC surveys can take less time than a WWC. Client locations can be spread out. Lots can be bigger than planned or have more damage than anticipated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Property type: Surveyors can choose where to begin, and how to plan their survey inspections during the day, as long as the surveys are not WWCs and don't interfere with a client’s specific request or conflict with CSR's notes for the survey.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On rare occasions, surveyors may be asked to complete jobs outside of our normal areas of operation, requiring special permission/approval from management (Terry).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Approval and Dispatch===&lt;br /&gt;
* Customer approves and signs the proposal, sending it back to CSR. CSR adds necessary written authorization documents and checks and/or modifies product table to ensure work reflected in system matches work specifically authorized by client. CSR then ensures that the COI has been ordered (or is in place) and changes the status of the proposal to &amp;quot;Authorized by Client&amp;quot; to advance the work order to the Operations team.&lt;br /&gt;
* Operations team checks the job into the scheduling system by verifying all approvals and proposals are complete, authorized by the client, and the system properly reflects the work authorized (price on the paperwork matches the price on the actual dispatch). For details, please visit the [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Dispatch#Dispatch_Online_Feed Dispatches to check in Section]. &lt;br /&gt;
* Once the job is checked in, Operations team is to schedule the jobs in the Dispatch calendar and then click on the dispatch number to send the customized email to the client. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scheduled dispatch detail.jpg|750px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the following situations, Operations sends a customized confirmation email to the client (using the correct template) and provides the scheduling details:&lt;br /&gt;
**Fixed or Emergency jobs&lt;br /&gt;
**Rescheduled jobs&lt;br /&gt;
**Pending jobs&lt;br /&gt;
**Partially completed jobs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Dispatch email templates.jpg|750px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All fields (from, to, cc, subject and email body) are editable and are to be correctly customized by the Operations team before sending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Job Scheduling===&lt;br /&gt;
Dispatch reviews specifications and schedules the job.&lt;br /&gt;
'''4 types of jobs/ dispatches:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Priority/ Emergency job: '''Emergency jobs MUST BE completed in 72 hours or less''', incurring extra costs for potential route disruption.&lt;br /&gt;
* Regular job: Must be completed within 2 weeks of approval.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed Date jobs: Scheduled well in advance, providing clients with advance notice based on their preferences. MAY exceed the two week limit for job completion based on clients preference and need to provide advance notice of the scheduled work.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cold weather jobs: In temperatures below 30 degrees, each Thermal Repair (TR) takes much longer, approx. 45 minutes to 1.5 hours. The cold weather plan involves providing clients with a temporary patch during winter, and the PHR team returns in spring for a permanent fix. Clients are billed for the temporary repair, with no payment due for the final repair. Photos of the damage, temporary repair, and final repair are provided to the client. Cold weather repairs are expedited, with a 60 TR job taking only a few hours, as opposed to the normal 2-2.5 days. If the temperature rises above 40 degrees or if work is slow, technicians switch to thermal repairs, adjusting the schedule accordingly. You can read more about the process here. CWP repairs ALSO REQUIRE a second dispatch and second invoice showing completed final repairs. These springtime second round repairs must be worked into spring routes efficiently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an 8-hour shift, tech teams complete 25-30 TRs within 4 hours of driving time. Unloading, starting machines, and cleaning/packing equipment can take 30 minutes for each job. So the Operations team must pay attention to both the number of TRs scheduled and the # of jobs scheduled. Technicians receive job details in the E-TECHNICIAN app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the job is completed (closed in E-TECHNICIAN app), Customer, Operations, and CSR receive a completion notification, with link to after pictures&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scheduling and building the route for technician jobs:'''&lt;br /&gt;
Operations team should build the job schedule, keeping in mind the nature of the client, when the client location would be least busy while respecting the dispatch notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Operations team should review schedules proactively and several times daily to ensure best possible routing, avoid bad weather by shifting crews to different areas, work in nearby jobs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dispatch considers various factors when designing and updating routes for technician jobs: &lt;br /&gt;
* Types of Repairs &lt;br /&gt;
Emergency repair- assign time of 60 minutes for 4 TRs. Emergency repairs take priority and the operation team MUST accommodate the client. &lt;br /&gt;
Regular repair- assign time of 60 minutes for 4 TRs&lt;br /&gt;
Wheel Rut repairs- assign time of 60 minutes for 4 TRs.&lt;br /&gt;
Fixed Type repair- assign time of 60 minutes for 4 TRs. Fixed job types are scheduled in advance for a specific date as per client preferences and the operation team generally tries to accommodate the client. &lt;br /&gt;
Cold Weather repairs- assign time of 30 minutes for 4 TRs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Technicians within the client region.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Drive time to and from client locations &lt;br /&gt;
Use Google Maps for efficient route design and Drive Time calculator in CRM, to find the shortest driving time between client locations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather considerations (avoiding rain, snow, wind) &lt;br /&gt;
Rain- Do not schedule a repair if there is continuous rain forecasted. Under active rain conditions, repairs cannot be completed. Technicians can work under light rain conditions but they should stop and notify operations if the rain continues, puddles form or they are working in a flow path where water cannot be prevented from entering the repair or on an inclined site where there is water run off etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Snow- If it starts snowing during the repair, technicians can complete that one repair and then stop. Operations should not schedule a repair under continuous snow conditions. Operations to call the client a day before a scheduled repair and ensure that the lot has been plowed and repaired if there was recent snow activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wind- Complete the repairs as normal, using wind blinds to keep the IR hot and functional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Sales pressure &lt;br /&gt;
PHR tries to accommodate sales (and clients) and complete repairs within a timely manner. So, if there is a request to complete a repair earlier than scheduled, operations will revisit the schedule and try to accommodate the client by sending out an additional technician team.	&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Time &lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can complete 25 - 30 TRs per day. The number of repairs that technicians can complete can vary depending on the drive time between client locations, traffic jams, type of repair, type of lot, extent of damage, location of repairs and delays caused due to water pooling, too much traffic in limited spaces, cars parked on the repair, at client’s request to leave the property, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Property type (General Guidelines):&lt;br /&gt;
Operations team should follow [https://drive.google.com/file/d/12RQWyRzqu8_XW0Rs1TzX205AGJBh1N3f/view?usp=drive_link Dispatch Job Type &amp;amp; Scheduling Guidelines] while scheduling job for technicians. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note: The following timelines are guidelines and not hard and fast rules. The PHR team can be there earlier or later than below times to complete their scheduled repairs and should always maintain a respectful, non-disruptive presence while working. '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**Apartments - M-F, recommended start time 9 with departure by 4. Do not schedule for weekend or earlier start time unless specifically approved or requested by the PM. &lt;br /&gt;
**Shopping Center/ Mall/ Strip Mall - M-F with earliest possible start time, avoid scheduling for Saturday but Sunday early morning is ok. Be especially careful of scheduling during the Christmas shopping season. &lt;br /&gt;
**Office Building/ Office Park - Almost any day of the week can work, weekends are ideal in most cases. Scheduling may be best with an early or late start depending on location of repairs and management preferences. &lt;br /&gt;
**Auto Dealership/ Car Sales Lot – Be certain repairs are not in flow-path of water from on-site car wash process - when they are, coordinate schedule to avoid any time the car wash will be in use. Avoid weekend and holiday schedule unless lot will be closed. Generally, a start time as early as possible Monday through Friday is best for these clients. &lt;br /&gt;
**Church- These property types can be done during the week, usually any time of day is fine. Should the church have a day care or school the job will need to be scheduled outside of to accommodate their preference. &lt;br /&gt;
**Federal/State/Local Government - Government facilities vary greatly from schools to office buildings, courthouses, fire stations and more. Generally, they must be scheduled to avoid peak use times - schools during very early morning so we are done before children arrive, late afternoon so we arrive after children are gone, or weekends when no children are there. Each type of property under the Government banner must be scheduled to minimize disruption to the clients and make it as easy as possible for technicians to provide repairs. &lt;br /&gt;
**Financial Institutions/Banks – Early in the morning before drive-through or site opens as these are typically small, tight lots. Weekends and/or minor holidays when they are closed (Check hours on-line) are also a good option.  &lt;br /&gt;
**Restaurants – Avoid mealtimes based on the type of restaurant. If they do not serve breakfast, mornings are great. Check hours online, schedule between mealtime peaks or after closing. &lt;br /&gt;
**Gas Station - Avoid morning and afternoon commute times. Schedule early or mid-day. If there are several gas stations in nearby locations, planning one overnight schedule is often a good option. &lt;br /&gt;
**Golf Course - Avoid weekends and most work holidays. Very early start is generally best. Check course hours online and coordinate with on-site staff. &lt;br /&gt;
**HOA/ OA/ Civic Association - M-F 9 to 4 unless client requests alternative arrangement. &lt;br /&gt;
**Hotel/ Motel - M-F 11 - 4 unless client requests alternative arrangement. &lt;br /&gt;
**Industrial/ Factory/ Warehouse - Weekends are generally best for these clients, but some facilities are slow at various times during the week and may be scheduled based upon input from the client. &lt;br /&gt;
**Medical Facility/Hospital - Early mornings are often the best choice for many hospitals and medical buildings. Depending on the type of facility, they may be closed on specific days and/or hours. If 24/7 schedule, early mornings or late afternoons are generally best. &lt;br /&gt;
**Mobile Home Park - M-F, recommended start time 9 with departure by 4. Do not schedule for weekend or earlier start time unless specifically approved or requested by the PM. &lt;br /&gt;
**Mom &amp;amp; Pop (Various small &amp;amp; independent) Business - Schedule for the least busy and disruptive time possible for the specific type of business operation. &lt;br /&gt;
**Retail Chain or Franchise - Generally early morning works best for retail-oriented businesses, except for restaurants. &lt;br /&gt;
**School or College - Try to avoid scheduling while class is in session. Schedule for early morning before students arrive, late afternoon after students depart or weekends when students and teachers are not present at all. &lt;br /&gt;
**Storage Facility – M-F middle of the day tends to work well for these businesses. &lt;br /&gt;
**Trade Association/ Non-Profit - In most cases, these can be scheduled almost anytime unless they have special circumstances or requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Technicians have to follow the schedule. Any deviation should be reported to Operations''' and technicians have to wait for further instructions. If the job is incomplete, techs are not allowed to leave the site without talking to Operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Operations team MUST MONITOR the LIVE ONLINE feed in the dispatch dash to ensure proper progress across all teams and all sites. If a job is more than 30 minutes behind, ops team should call the technician team proactively to resolve whatever issue has prevented timely start or pace of job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1818</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1818"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T23:28:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Proposal Maker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1817</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1817"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T23:25:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|tumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1816</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1816"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:13:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1815</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1815"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:10:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-26-50-759_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1814</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-50-759 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-26-50-759_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1814"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:10:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1d&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-26-14-093_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1813</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-26-14-093 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-26-14-093_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1813"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:09:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1s&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-25-43-437_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1812</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-25-43-437 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-25-43-437_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1812"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:09:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1a&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1811</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-38-294 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-38-294_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1811"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:02:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;1q&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1810</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1810"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T21:00:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-30-635_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1809</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-24-30-635 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-24-30-635_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1809"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:58:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;9&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-23-34-539_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1808</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-34-539 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-23-34-539_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1808"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:58:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;8&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1807</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1807"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:57:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-23-09-804_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1806</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-23-09-804 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-23-09-804_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1806"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:56:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;7&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-22-53-084_com.android.camera.jpg&amp;diff=1805</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-22-53-084 com.android.camera.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-22-53-084_com.android.camera.jpg&amp;diff=1805"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:56:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;6&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-36-157_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1804</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-36-157 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-36-157_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1804"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:55:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;5&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1803</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1803"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:53:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1802</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-21-20-799 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-21-20-799_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1802"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:53:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;4&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1801</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1801"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:51:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center|3]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-20-13-372_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1800</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-13-372 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-20-13-372_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1800"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:51:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;3&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1799</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1799"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:49:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-20-00-959_com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg&amp;diff=1798</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-20-00-959 com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-20-00-959_com.google.android.apps.maps.jpg&amp;diff=1798"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:43:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;2&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1797</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1797"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:41:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Photo_2024-09-12_16.40.28.jpg&amp;diff=1796</id>
		<title>File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.40.28.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Photo_2024-09-12_16.40.28.jpg&amp;diff=1796"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:41:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;c&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1795</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1795"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:37:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Photo_2024-09-12_16.32.42.jpg&amp;diff=1794</id>
		<title>File:Photo 2024-09-12 16.32.42.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Photo_2024-09-12_16.32.42.jpg&amp;diff=1794"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:33:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calling&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1793</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1793"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:13:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Proposal Maker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Roller.jpg|250px|center|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Roller.jpg|250px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1792</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1792"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:11:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Roller.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-4.png|500px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Roller.jpg&amp;diff=1791</id>
		<title>File:Roller.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Roller.jpg&amp;diff=1791"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:10:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;test with alijon&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1790</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1790"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:07:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-3.png|500px|center|Send an e-mail to the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-4.png|500px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1789</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1789"/>
		<updated>2024-09-12T20:07:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-3.png|500px|center|Send an e-mail to the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-4.png|500px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1788</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1788"/>
		<updated>2024-09-11T17:20:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Proposal Maker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|250px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-3.png|500px|center|Send an e-mail to the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-4.png|500px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1787</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1787"/>
		<updated>2024-09-11T17:19:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Proposal Maker */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-3.png|500px|center|Send an e-mail to the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-4.png|500px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1786</id>
		<title>Mobile applications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Mobile_applications&amp;diff=1786"/>
		<updated>2024-09-10T14:44:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Lead generator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Proposal Maker=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Proposal Maker app works on the same concept as the Lead Generator App, using a ''wizard'' to guide the user step by step and avoid missing or skipping information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The slight difference between them is that surveyors use this app to assess the damage and provide quotes and job requirements to fix the potholes in a property, such as size, amount of TRs, type of work and tools needed, etc. Surveyors use their access to see all the activities assigned to them, including the property type to visit and directions to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The series of images below display each section with brief descriptions &lt;br /&gt;
Below is the main screen where the surveyors can see all assigned activities and filter them by date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-1.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each task, they can directly contact the customer and the opportunity owner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-3.png|500px|center|Send an e-mail to the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-2.png|500px|center|Call the customer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-4.png|500px|center|Call opp owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can see more information about the opportunity, use the GPS to navigate the property, or complete the opportunity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-5.png|500px|thumb|center|See more info]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-6.png|500px|thumb|center|Navigate to property]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-7.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-8.png|500px|thumb|center|Complete Opp]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If needed, the surveyors can also add more repairs, PH damage, or External Damage where the damage needs to be repaired by one of our partners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-9.png|500px|thumb|center|Add more repairs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they were to add more repairs, they first need to take a ''before picture'' of the damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-10.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, they have to set the estimated amount of TRs (Thermal Repairs) they think will be needed to fix that damage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-11.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the next step, the surveyor has to set the specific pothole location, the more accurate, the better.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-12.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-13.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then they must specify whether the technicians will need to take any extra tools or materials, and finally add notes to the job.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-14.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, once they have closed it, the system will ask the technician to confirm having read the task notes, add notes to the opportunity, and finish the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-15.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-16.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-17.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other option is to add or create an External Proposal for our partners. When the surveyor clicks on &amp;quot;External Damage,&amp;quot; the app will show a pop-up window asking confirmation to proceed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-18.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surveyor must upload a picture of the damage before choosing the product or required type of work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-19.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, the wizard will ask the surveyor to add any notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-20.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And a pop-up window will ask for confirmation to close the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PM-21.png|500px|thumb|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=eTechnician 2.0=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://crm.potholerepair.com/appStore/ Download it here]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our technicians use this app for two main purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check-in, to upload their time card, the truck inspection, and inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
To access all jobs, dispatches, and surveys assigned to them&lt;br /&gt;
This application is solely for our employees' use and not for external users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 1.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, our technicians can view both the Dispatches and Surveys assigned.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagen numero 3.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;upload receipt&amp;quot; option allows them to upload any bill or expense they might have as part of their duties; this way, all expenses can be kept and tracked in one place.&lt;br /&gt;
When they hit &amp;quot;upload receipt,&amp;quot; the app will open up the camera to take a picture of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4Upload Receipt.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to start the working day, the technicians will need to upload the necessary daily documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6Daily Docs Alert.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They will need to do so by clicking on the camera button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5Daily Docs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing all of the necessary documents, an alert will pop-up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7Daily Docs Completion.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the job, the user can see the details of it. The user icon with a star on the side shows the team leader for the job, and clicking on it will show the whole crew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:8Job detail.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a technician clicks on &amp;quot;start,&amp;quot; the system will send an email to the customer and to the owner of the opportunity to notify them the repair is in process. The system also allows Headquarters to track progress using a live feed regarding the job progression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start Job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:9Start job 2.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirming the operation, the system will also remind the technicians to log out from their vehicles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:10Driver Logout.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can see all details regarding the job, see the surveyor's notes, and call either the owner or the surveyor. Using buttons, they can&lt;br /&gt;
* Navigate to the pothole&lt;br /&gt;
* Take a picture after fixing the damage&lt;br /&gt;
* Reschedule the item if they could not finish it at that time due to unexpected reasons.&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the screen, there are more options to either add a new repair, reschedule the job or view the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:11Inside thejob details.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When clocking on 'Take Pic' button, it will let you select to open the camera, or select a picture from the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:12Take Picture.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After taking the picture, the system will open a window to set the number of TRs needed to fix the pothole and specify the type of repair they performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:13Set TRs.jpg|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to add further repairs is very similar: Technicians need to click &amp;quot;add new,&amp;quot; take a picture of the damage, set the estimated amount of TRs to be used, and set the location of the pothole. After they have added all the new additional repairs and clicked on &amp;quot;finish,&amp;quot; the system will notify the account manager to get approvals. If approved, the technicians should fix those additionals repairs before leaving the property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:14Additional repairs.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After they have completed all the items within the dispatch, they will automatically be redirected to this screen to add the last notes for the dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:15Ending notes.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the job is complete, they can finally close the dispatch and confirm completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:16End job.png|250px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the technicians are done, the app will prevent them from logging into their vehicle before driving to the next property.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=ELD and HOS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PotholeRepair DOT# 2506097&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logbook – SPLogbook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://support.intellishift.com/hc/en-us/articles/360040966534-Using-the-Hours-of-Service-Application Logbook App User Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hours of Service - [https://youtu.be/--IUb2hvzxg Operator Training Video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for iOS: [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/sp-logbook/id1260958881 Click Here to Download]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SP Logbook for Android: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.vehicletracking.sp_logbook&amp;amp;hl=en_US&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect training (Admin ONLY)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lVCDHn4e9Fc&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field training INSPECTION&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bt7Tx5pclMk&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ELD - HOS Operating training video&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=--IUb2hvzxg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Access=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[RPH]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lead]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Contacts]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Opportunity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Dispatch]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Invoices and Payroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[External Portals]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Back-end Processes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Main3.jpg&amp;diff=1785</id>
		<title>File:Main3.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Main3.jpg&amp;diff=1785"/>
		<updated>2024-09-05T18:29:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;F&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_20220805-054001_Proposal_Maker.jpg&amp;diff=1784</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_20220805-054001_Proposal_Maker.jpg&amp;diff=1784"/>
		<updated>2024-09-05T18:05:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: Mmoura uploaded a new version of File:Screenshot 20220805-054001 Proposal Maker.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;They can access more options by hitting the sandwich menu at the top left corner.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:PM-1.png&amp;diff=1783</id>
		<title>File:PM-1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:PM-1.png&amp;diff=1783"/>
		<updated>2024-09-05T17:43:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
-&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-19-20-638_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1782</id>
		<title>File:Screenshot 2024-09-05-12-19-20-638 com.pothole.etechnician.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_2024-09-05-12-19-20-638_com.pothole.etechnician.jpg&amp;diff=1782"/>
		<updated>2024-09-05T17:42:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Front Page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Inventory_Management&amp;diff=1779</id>
		<title>Inventory Management</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php?title=Inventory_Management&amp;diff=1779"/>
		<updated>2024-06-04T17:07:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmoura: /* Inventory Overview and Scheduling */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Introduction=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Effective inventory management is a critical component of ensuring operational efficiency and customer satisfaction. This wiki page outlines a comprehensive four-step inventory management process, including inventory checks, record updates, ordering, and receiving. The process involves various teams, from branch managers and technicians to the operations and admin teams, each playing a crucial role in maintaining accurate inventory levels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inventory Checks==&lt;br /&gt;
====Inventory Overview and Scheduling====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Scheduling''': The Operations Team will schedule &lt;br /&gt;
* '''For each yard: a regular monthly inventory checks- yard and truck on the same day'''. If the monthly inventory check date is in conflict with an emergency job, then the monthly inventory check will be rescheduled to another convenient date within the week. The Branch Manager and the Technician will conduct these inventory checks together, so both must be scheduled via the CRM task system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''A monthly task for the surveyor''' to call the branch manager about their current inventory status and needs in their car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''A monthly task for the HQ''' to inventory the master warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Process:'''&lt;br /&gt;
Operations team schedules the monthly inventory checks for the truck, surveyor vehicles, yard and warehouse. Branch Managers conduct truck, surveyor vehicle and yard stock checks at their respective locations and fill in the printed out sheets [[Employees PHR Inventory Mastersheet 2023]]. Branch managers then email the completed and final inventory sheets to the Operations Team. Operations team will then update inventory records, place orders to replenish yard inventories and follow up with branch managers to ensure they receive the orders in time. Operations team will follow up with branch managers to ensure that the inventory process is completed in time and to satisfaction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HQ Personnel: Conduct the master warehouse inventory using a printout of the [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Employees_PHR_Inventory_Mastersheet_2023 Employees PHR Inventory Mastersheet 2023] and email the final completed sheet to Operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Truck Inventory====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Planning:''' Technicians use the eTechnician App to view their jobs and ensure they have enough inventory for the upcoming week (including special attention items such as risers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Utilization:''' Technicians use the eTechnician App to input usage during the week. Operations monitors the incoming data from the app and notifies the Branch Manager immediately to replenish or replace the required inventory on the truck (excluding repair materials such as asphalt, tack and propane).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Monthly Checks:''' Technicians completed scheduled monthly inventory checks with branch managers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Yard Inventory====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Planning:''' Branch managers plan yard inventory for the month ahead. At all times, branch managers work with Operations to ensure that they have enough inventory for the next two months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Utilization:''' Items are provided to technicians and surveyors during the month as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Monthly Checks:''' At the end of the month, branch managers fill out printed inventory sheets and submit them to the Operations Team via email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Surveyor Inventory====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Planning:''' The surveyor checks inventory before and after every trip to ensure he has what he needs for the week ahead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Monthly Reporting:''' Surveyors are scheduled to call branch managers and inform branch managers about their usage at the end of each month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Refill:''' Branch managers refill surveyor inventory for the upcoming month when the surveyor next visits the yard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Master Warehouse Inventory====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Planning:''' HQ oversees master warehouse inventory to ensure that the warehouse has what the company needs for the next 6 months ahead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Monthly Checks:''' HQ designates monthly inventory checks for the master warehouse and submits the information to Operations via email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Updating Records ==&lt;br /&gt;
Using the printouts sent to them by the Branch Managers, Operations Team will update and validate the Monthly inventory checks, using the [[PHR Inventory Calculation Sheets]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Operations will then order items to replenish stock and have the orders directly shipped to the respective yards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ordering Process == &lt;br /&gt;
====Ordering Responsibilities====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Operations Team:''' Places orders for yard, truck, and surveyor supplies, makes payment, and has the items directly shipped to the respective yard. Uses the [[Operations: PHR Inventory Mastersheet 2023]] to find the right items. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Admin Team:''' Places orders and processes payments for capital equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Payment Process:''' Varied payment methods as per the vendor, including credit cards, Paypal, accounts, and line of credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Purchase Order Policies====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Adherence:''' Items exceeding $800 in cost require a PO. The [[purchase order policy]] emphasizes the importance of selecting vendors based on the optimal combination of: price, delivery capabilities, quality, past performance, service capabilities, ease of ordering, and payment.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Vendor Relationships:''' Operations Team ensures that the [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Vendor_Mastersheet Vendor Mastersheet] is updated regularly and uses it to build strong vendor relationships.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Quality Assurance Checks:''' Branch managers and HQ check orders for quality, accuracy, and completeness. If the branch manager doesn’t receive the required order within 2 weeks, they should contact the operations team immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Reporting Issues:''' Branch Managers and HQ should immediately contact the operations team for any problems with the orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Conclusion==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This comprehensive inventory management process involves collaboration between various teams, utilizing technology, and adhering to strict policies. Regular checks, accurate record-keeping, and efficient ordering and receiving processes contribute to maintaining optimal inventory levels and ensuring smooth business operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use [http://18.207.158.143:8080/index.php/Operations Operations] to go back to the Main Operations Page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmoura</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>